2 Series
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 VI/17, 07 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 268.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's
Manual on the Control Display in the vehicle,
Online Owner's Manual, BMW Driver’s Guide
App.
6 Information
At a glance
16 Cockpit
20 iDrive
29 Voice activation system
32 General settings
45 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
50 Opening and closing
71 Settings
82 Transporting children safely
86 Driving
102 Displays
115 Lights
121 Safety
145 Driving stability control systems
151 Driving comfort
171 Climate control
180 Interior equipment
188 Storage compartments
Driving tips
194 Things to remember when driving
198 Loading
200 Saving fuel
Mobility
210 Refueling
212 Fuel
214 Wheels and tires
232 Engine compartment
234 Engine oil
238 Coolant
240 Maintenance
242 Replacing components
248 Breakdown assistance
256 Care
Reference
264 Technical data
267 Appendix
268 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general information
on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the
features and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, for
instance maintenance and repair, according to
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐
sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as
"another qualified service center or repair
shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the
vehicle to function safely or provide assistance
during driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facili‐
tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐
nently store information about the condition of
the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐
quirements, technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of
a component, a module, a system or the envi‐
ronment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire pressure, battery status.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its in‐
dividual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐
dicator.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, for instance lights and
brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to
recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps
the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle
functions. The majority of this data is transient
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small proportion of the data is stored in
event or fault memories and, if needed, in the
vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical information
can be read out from the vehicle together with
the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop can read out the information.
The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
the data. The data is collected, processed, and
used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
ice network. The data documents the technical
conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating
faults and improving quality, and is transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product
liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle
manufacturer needs technical data from the
vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐
cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐
hicle by means of the service history and trans‐
ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐
plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains
the proprietor of the vehicle.
Data entry and data transfer into the
vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
data can be transferred into the vehicle when
using comfort and infotainment functions,
for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi‐
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings se‐
lected for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing comfort and individual settings can be
stored in the vehicle and modified at any time,
for instance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in
the car's interior.
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device
at the same time. Depending on the type of
connection, this includes, for instance position
data and other general vehicle information.
This optimizes the way in which selected apps,
for instance navigation or music playback,
work.
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, for instance ac‐
tive access to vehicle data. How the data will
be processed further is determined by the pro‐
vider of the particular app being used. The ex‐
tent of the possible settings depends on the
respective app and the operating system of the
mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐
tween the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via an
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
network connection enables 'online functions'
to be used. These include online services and
apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manu‐
facturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or
manufacturer's website. The relevant legal in‐
formation pertaining to data protection is pro‐
vided there too. Personal data may be used to
perform online services. Data is exchanged
over a secure connection, for instance with the
IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer in‐
tended for this purpose. Any collection, proc‐
essing, and use of personal data above and be‐
yond that needed to provide the services must
always be based on a legal permission, con‐
tractual arrangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infra‐
structure and how the infotainment system is
used. This information cannot be traced back
to individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the
data enables the manufacturer to further im‐
prove its products or services, for instance by
incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐
tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐
vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐
tions, some of which are subject to a charge,
can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐
sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐
tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of
functions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid‐
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be
obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 12
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Seite 13
Information
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the
buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you
will become familiar with the available control
concepts and options quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows, all 63
2 Power windows, individual 63
3 Exterior mirror operation 79
4 Glove compartment on the driver's
side 189
Driver assistance systems
Intelligent Safety 132
Lane departure warning 142
5 Lights
Front fog lights 118
Light switch 115
Lights off
Daytime running lights 117
Parking lights 115
Low beams 115
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 116
Adaptive light functions 117
High-beam Assistant 118
Instrument lighting 119
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 91
High beams, head‐
light flasher 91
High-beam Assistant 118
Roadside parking lights 115
Onboard Computer 111
7 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 157
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupt 151
Cruise control: store speed
Cruise control: resume speed
Active Cruise Control: reduce
distance
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Cruise control rocker switch
8 Instrument cluster 102
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation 29
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 111
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 87
Auto Start/Stop function 88
11 Steering column stalk, right
Wipers 92
Rain sensor 93
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 93
12 Horn, entire surface
13 Heated steering wheel 81
14 Adjust the steering wheel 81
15 Unlock hood 233
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 20
2 Glove compartment 188
3 Ventilation 177
4 Hazard warning system 248
Central locking system 55
5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6
6 Climate control 171
7 Controller with buttons 20
8 Convertible top 65
9 Parking brake 90
10 PDC Park Distance Control 160
Rearview camera 163
Parking assistant 166
11 Driving Dynamics Control 148
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 145
12 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 96
Manual transmission selector lever 95
Seite 18
At a glance Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Operation
Overview
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 260.
Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
damaged.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller, refer to
page 26.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for
navigation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
▷ Turn.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Press.
▷ Move in two directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Button Function
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired po‐
sition, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐
ple "iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
The arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split
screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the
controller.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Entering
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ters or number.
Hold the controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left side.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐
ple "iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
The white arrow indicates that additional dis‐
plays can be called up.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Opening recently used menus
1. Tap on symbol.
2. Tap on symbol.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 24.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
Controller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
in the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed in sev‐
eral menus on the right side of the split screen,
for example information from the onboard
computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the Control Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Seite 27
iDrive At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
WiFi.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle po‐
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
tries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Saving a function
1. Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 28
At a glance iDrive
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐
play can be operated by voice commands via
the voice activation system. The system sup‐
ports you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary can only be operated
via the voice activation system to a limited
extent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 32.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
Seite 29
Voice activation system At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
One example: opening the
tone settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Adjusting
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select desired setting.
Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while improv‐
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
vider and locally stored there.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, for instance due to background
noise or talking.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Seite 30
At a glance Voice activation system
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the drive profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 248, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and convertible
top closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 31
Voice activation system At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 30.
Time
Setting the time zone
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 32
At a glance General settings
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, fuel consumption,
distances and temperature.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW Connected app or in the Connected‐
Drive customer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
vated or deactivated.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
Seite 33
General settings At a glance
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screen saver
If no settings are made via iDriver, after a time
that can be set, a screen saver is displayed.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Selecting the contents of the main
menu
For some menu items of the main menu, the
displayed contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
2. "Contents of main menu"
3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
Using iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
About iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
Seite 34
At a glance General settings
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐
ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti‐
vated for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Using iDrive:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal in the vehicle
The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cook‐
ies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
Using iDrive:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
Seite 35
General settings At a glance
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐
letion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for us‐
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec‐
tion type to select depends on the mobile de‐
vice and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible func‐
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The scope of functions depends on the
mobile device.
Function Connec‐
tion type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth
or USB.
Using compatible apps via iDrive. Bluetooth
or USB.
Function Connec‐
tion type
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
Internet
hotspot.
Use Apple Carplay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring:
Showing the smartphone display
on the Control Display.
WiFi.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
▷ Screen Mirroring.
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Seite 36
At a glance General settings
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 43, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 37, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 37.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, for instance visibility, refer to
the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmitting
all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device
will be used:
Seite 37
General settings At a glance
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the de‐
vice and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list, refer to page 41.
If connection was not successful: Frequently
Asked Questions, refer to page 38.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec‐
tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge mobile phone.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle.
Unpair the connected mobile phone from
the vehicle and pair and connect only one
mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures
for mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via
iDrive?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio
device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
Seite 38
At a glance General settings
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected
to the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 58.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 43.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
Seite 39
General settings At a glance
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 37, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 186.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 41.
Internet connection
General information
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐
ternet hotspot.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 37, with
WiFi interface.
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating the Internet hotspot
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting device with Internet
hotspot
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device.
Select network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
With the first Internet usage via the Internet
hotspot, data volume must be purchased from
a service provider.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Settings
The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐
vices.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4.
Press button.
5.
▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Seite 40
At a glance General settings
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Activate or deactivate the function.
6. To confirm entry of the hotspot code or the
name of the network:
Select the symbol.
Apple CarPlay
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compati‐
ble Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice op‐
eration and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 37.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation
are switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer
to page 37.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to page 41.
Operation
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver’s Guide app or, if necessary, the Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is estab‐
lished, CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de‐
vice list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of stored vehicles un‐
der Bluetooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when the ignition is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with the
vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
Seite 41
General settings At a glance
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Internet hotspot"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐
vice will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 42.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Deleting the device
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Seite 42
At a glance General settings
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, e.g., mobile phones and MP3 players.
Software updates are available for many of the
supported devices. The vehicle is maintained
up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐
dates.
Updates and related current information is
available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
About iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB data storage to an USB
interface.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Await the updating.
11. Confirm system restart.
Updating software via BMW
Teleservices
Updating software via BMW Teleservices is
country-specific and may not be available.
The software is first transferred into the vehicle
and can then be installed. The software can be
installed at a time different from the time of
transfer.
The software can be transferred while driving,
and if the trip is interrupted it will resume auto‐
matically the next time the vehicle is driven. All
other functions remain available during the
transfer. Cellular network reception must be
available for the transfer to take place.
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Update software"
5. "Teleservices"
6. "Load update"
The update is loaded but not installed.
7. Install or delete the update.
▷ "Install software"
The loaded update is installed.
This step can be carried out at a later
point in time.
▷ "Remove update"
The loaded update is removed.
The following steps are omitted.
8. "OK"
9. Wait for the update to complete.
10. Confirm system restart.
Seite 43
General settings At a glance
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first soft‐
ware update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 44
At a glance General settings
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated owner's manual consists of
four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Keyword search
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Videos
The basic functions of selected systems are
explained in the videos.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select desired setting.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn Controller, until the next or previous con‐
tents are displayed.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Seite 45
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Changing between a function and the
operating instructions
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5.
Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the Programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 28, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired button and hold for
more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played via the selected entry point.
Seite 46
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Seite 47
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replace the battery, refer to
page 53.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 61.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 58.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 240.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 61,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 58, are applied.
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to
page 61.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 119.
▷ The exterior lighting activated in the set‐
tings, refer to page 61, is switched on.
▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are
folded open. This function must be acti‐
vated in the settings.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 62, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Convenient opening
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the convertible top. There is a
risk of injury. When opening and closing the
convertible top, observe the movement and
keep the area of movement clear.◀
Opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows are opened, as long as the but‐
ton on the remote control is pressed.
With Comfort Access:
If close to the vehicle, the convertible top is
also opened.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control until the convertible top
is fully opened and the convertible top well
storage cover is fully closed.
Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the
motion.
In this case, the convertible top and convertible
top well storage cover will slowly lower after a
short period of time. The convertible top and
the convertible top well storage cover are not
locked. Press button again until the convertible
top operation is completed.
Locking
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being locked.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 62, is
switched on.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Stop button.
Seite 51
Opening and closing Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the convertible top. There is a
risk of injury. When opening and closing the
convertible top, observe the movement and
keep the area of movement clear.◀
Closing
Press and hold this button on the remote
control in the area close to the vehicle.
The windows and convertible top close.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the
hazard warning flashers are switched on.
Press and hold the button of the remote con‐
trol, until the convertible top and the
convertible top well storage cover are fully
closed.
Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of
the vehicle stops the motion.
In this case, the convertible top and convertible
top well storage cover will slowly lower after a
short period of time. The convertible top and
the convertible top well storage cover are not
locked. Press button again until the convertible
top operation is completed.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior
lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 61.
The tailgate can normally not be opened if the
convertible top is not fully opened or closed. If
the tailgate can be opened, make sure it does
not collide with the convertible top well storage
cover.
The tailgate can only be opened if it is not
locked. Separately lock the tailgate, refer to
page 58.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Seite 52
Controls Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1.
Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 54.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐
itive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote
control until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 53.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
Seite 53
Opening and closing Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a differ‐
ent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 54.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
1.
Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated
key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Remove the integrated key before
pulling the outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Seite 54
Controls Opening and closing
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 54.
Button for central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Button for the central locking system.
Unlocking and locking
Press button. For locking, the doors must be
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
Seite 55
Opening and closing Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Opening tailgate.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door with your fin‐
ger for approx. 1 second without grasping the
door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Open tailgate
General information
If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
Press button on the tailgate.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Seite 56
Controls Opening and closing
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 53.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 54.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 61.
The tailgate can normally not be opened if the
convertible top is not fully opened or closed. If
the tailgate can be opened, make sure it does
not collide with the convertible top well storage
cover.
The tailgate can only be opened if it is not
locked. Separately lock the tailgate, refer to
page 58.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button on the tailgate.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
mote control, refer to page 52.
The tailgate opens slightly and can be swung
upward.
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area.
Seite 57
Opening and closing Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Closing
Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down.
Locking separately
General information
The switch in the glove compartment decou‐
ples the tailgate from the central locking sys‐
tem, so it can no longer be opened.
If the glove compartment is locked with the
integrated key, the remote control can be
handed over without the integrated key, for in‐
stance to a valet parking service. It is then no
longer possible for objects to be removed from
the cargo area even with the remote control.
Securing
▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1.
▷ Tailgate not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the desired position.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate unlocks.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to
the remote control currently used.
Seite 58
Controls Opening and closing
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control. It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐
cated to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own
remote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings depends on country
and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position if applicable.
Both the positions saved via the seat mem‐
ory and the last position set are saved.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
lows you to call up personal vehicle settings,
even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your
own remote control.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
profile are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
the remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a
different remote control, this driver profile
will apply to both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
profiles.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
Seite 59
Opening and closing Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in
use are reset to their factory settings.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before deliver‐
ing the vehicle to a workshop. The stored
driver profiles can be taken into another vehi‐
cle.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 39.
▷ Online.
Importing driver profiles
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
ported driver profile.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed during
each start to select the desired profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote con‐
trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐
lowing cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
Seite 60
Controls Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 58, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and
door(s)"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate unlocks.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
The most recent position is independent of the
positions saved via the seat memory.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Seite 61
Opening and closing Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Automatic locking
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on/off
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or with Comfort Access, the
alarm system is switched on/off at the same
time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 63.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Seite 62
Controls Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The interior is monitored to the height of the
seats. The alarm system is switched on to‐
gether with the interior motion sensor even
when the convertible top is open. Falling ob‐
jects such as leaves can trigger the alarm unin‐
tentionally.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 53.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on
your person, grasp the door handle on the
driver's or front passenger door com‐
pletely.
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 63
Opening and closing Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Overview
Power windows
Opening individually
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 51.
Opening together
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
All windows open while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
All windows open automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐
tion.
Closing individually
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
With the door closed, the front windows
close automatically. Pulling the switch
again stops the motion. The rear windows
close while the switch is being held.
Convenient closing via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 52.
Closing together
Pull the switch to or beyond the resist‐
ance point.
All windows are closed while the switch is be‐
ing held.
Pinch protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
Seite 64
Controls Opening and closing
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The window closes with limited jam pro‐
tection . If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protec‐
tion .
Convertible top
General information
The convertible top can be opened or closed
at speeds up to approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible
top is being moved, the convertible top move‐
ment stops.
Observe the following information:
▷ The tailgate can normally not be opened if
the convertible top is not fully opened or
closed. If the tailgate can be opened, make
sure it does not collide with the convertible
top well storage cover.
▷ Close the convertible top when the vehicle
is parked. A closed convertible top pro‐
tects it from weather-related damage and
to some extent from theft.
▷ Even when the convertible top is closed,
only store valuables in the locked cargo
area.
▷ At higher speeds, vacuum produced in the
car's interior causes the convertible top to
begin to flutter. Increase the air flow via the
ventilation so that no vacuum is produced
in the vehicle.
▷ It is not possible to start the engine and
operate the convertible top simultane‐
ously. When the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button or using the Auto Start/
Stop function, the convertible top move‐
ment is briefly interrupted.
▷ Opening a door interrupts closure of the
convertible top.
▷ When loading the cargo area, make sure
that the cargo does not push against the
cargo area partition, refer to page 67,
from below.
▷ In order to protect the battery, move the
convertible top only when the engine is
running.
▷ Before closing the convertible top, remove
any foreign objects from the windshield
frame; otherwise, closing may be pre‐
vented.
Safety information
NOTE
Incorrect operation can damage the
convertible top and other parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of property damage. During op‐
eration, heed the following points:
▷ Keep the area of movement of the
convertible top clear because the
convertible top swivels out upward. Maxi‐
mum area of movement: 98.5 in‐
ches/2.5 meters.
▷ Fully close the tailgate.
▷ Do not leave the convertible top open for
more than a day while it is wet.
▷ Do not open the convertible top, if it is wet,
covered in snow, iced up, or dirty.
▷ Do not place objects on the convertible
top.
▷ The rollover protection system may not be
triggered.
▷ Do not operate convertible top on uneven
sections of road.
▷ Always open or close the convertible top
completely. The convertible top is only
locked in the final positions.◀
Seite 65
Opening and closing Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the convertible top. There is a
risk of injury. When opening and closing the
convertible top, observe the movement and
keep the area of movement clear.◀
WARNING
When operating the convertible top while
driving, the view to the rear may be limited. At
speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h the convertible
top remains in its current position. There is a
danger of accidents and property damage.
When operating the convertible top while driv‐
ing, observe traffic attentively and if necessary,
reduce speed. Do not operate while backing
up or with wind.◀
WARNING
The convertible top is not suitable for the
mounting of roof carrier systems. The roof car‐
rier could come loose. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Do not attach any roof carrier systems to
the convertible top.◀
WARNING
A convertible top that is not completely
open or closed is not locked and can open by
itself while driving due to the wind. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the convertible top is always
completely open or closed.◀
Overview
Convertible top switch
Functional requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled in
order to be able to move the convertible top.
▷ The ignition or radio-ready state must be
switched on.
▷ The cargo area partition, refer to
page 67, is folded down.
▷ The tailgate is closed.
▷ The external temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system
is sufficient.
▷ The convertible top drive is not overheat‐
ing.
▷ The vehicle speed is not too high.
▷ The windows can be lowered.
If this requirement is not met, a check control
message is displayed.
Operating from the inside
Opening
Push the switch and hold it.
The windows roll down and the convertible top
opens while the switch is being pulled.
Closing
Pull the switch and hold it.
The windows are lowered, the convertible top
is closed and the windows are raised again
while the switch is being pressed.
Preventing an interruption
Push or pull the switch until the convertible top
is completely open or closed and the end of
the procedure is indicated by a Check Control
message. Always make sure that the
convertible top well storage cover is com‐
pletely closed. Only if the convertible top is
completely open or closed will the convertible
Seite 66
Controls Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
top and convertible top well storage cover be
locked.
The convertible top movement is interrupted if
the switch is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction using the
switch.
If there is a longer interruption with the ignition
switched on, convertible top and convertible
top well storage cover remain approx. 10 mi‐
nutes in the current position before they slowly
go down. If the ignition is switched off,
convertible top and convertible top well stor‐
age cover lower already after a short waiting
period.
The convertible top and the convertible top
well storage cover are not locked in this case.
Operate switch again until the convertible op‐
eration is terminated.
Operating from the outside
With Comfort Access:
The convertible top can also be operated from
outside via Comfort Access.
▷ Convenient opening with remote opera‐
tion, refer to page 51.
▷ Convenient closing with the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 52.
Cargo area partition
Fold down cargo area partition in the back so
that the convertible top can be opened.
Fold down cargo area partition in the front in
order to enlarge the cargo area capacity when
the convertible top is closed.
Manually close convertible top
General information
If there is a malfunction, the convertible top
can be manually closed. Two persons are nec‐
essary to do this.
If possible, have a convertible top manually
closed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
In case of an electrical malfunction, the
convertible top cannot be locked in the fully
open position. The convertible top will rise up
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of
an accident. Do not open the closed
convertible top manually.◀
WARNING
While manually lowering the convertible
top, body parts can be jammed. With one-
sided operation, the convertible top can be
damaged. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the convertible top and
convertible top well is free. Only close the
convertible top manually with two people.◀
Before closing
1.
Lower the windows completely.
2. Switching off the ignition.
3. Carefully open the tailgate, taking care not
to damage the convertible top well storage
cover.
Seite 67
Opening and closing Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
4. Remove the two large lids from the trim. If
needed, use the screwdriver from the on‐
board vehicle tool kit.
5. Unlock convertible top well storage cover.
To do this, pull on the right lid until the
convertible top well storage cover opens
on the right side.
Proceed accordingly on the left side.
6. When the convertible top is closed man‐
ually, the tailgate can no longer be opened.
Remove urgently needed items from the
cargo area and close the tailgate.
You need the screwdriver and Allen
wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Lifting out convertible top
1.
Grasp the sheet metal of the convertible
top well storage cover from the outside us‐
ing both hands, and swing it slightly up‐
ward.
2. Before further opening the convertible top
well storage cover, secure the hook, arrow.
Insert the screwdriver from the outside into
the hook and hold it in place during further
opening.
3. Open the convertible top well storage
cover completely.
4. Make sure that the hinge, arrow, is slightly
bent forward.
5. Lift the convertible top out on the front on
both sides, and swing it forward. Keep the
convertible top well storage cover open, for
instance with your shoulder.
6. Place the rear convertible top frame verti‐
cally, arrow 1, close the convertible top
well storage cover, and press it down as far
as possible on both sides, arrow 2. Next,
Seite 68
Controls Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
place the rear convertible top frame onto
the convertible top well storage cover.
Lock convertible cover
1.
Carefully remove the cover in the center of
the front convertible top frame. If needed,
use the screwdriver.
2. While one person presses the center of
front convertible top frame onto the wind‐
shield frame: turn the Allen wrench coun‐
terclockwise up to the stop. The front
convertible top frame must be locked in
the windshield frame.
The rear convertible top frame is automati‐
cally pressed onto the convertible top well
storage cover.
3. Have the convertible top checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Wind deflector
The concept
The wind deflector reduces the air movement
in the vehicle interior when driving with the
convertible top down.
Safety information
NOTE
When moving the front seats back, the
wind deflector can be damaged. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement is clear prior to moving the front
seats back.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the wind deflector. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement around
the wind deflector is clear when installing and
removing it and folding it up.◀
WARNING
Objects placed on the installed wind de‐
flector can be thrown into the car's interior or
endanger other traffic participants, for instance
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuver. The objects can damage the wind de‐
flector. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not place any objects on
the installed wind deflector.◀
Installation
The wind deflector is located in a protective
jacket in the cargo area.
1.
Take the wind deflector out of the protec‐
tive jacket.
Seite 69
Opening and closing Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Fold open the wind deflector.
2. Insert wind deflector from one side of the
vehicle with the pins in the corresponding
fixing points on the opposite side of the ve‐
hicle.
3. Lift the wind deflector in the center, ar‐
row 1, until the pins on the installation side
can be positioned in front of the fixing
points, arrows 2.
4. Press the wind deflector downward, ar‐
rows 1, while inserting the pins in the cor‐
responding fixing points.
Grasp the inner framework of the wind de‐
flector on the recessed grip and fold it up,
arrow 2.
Removing
Proceed in reverse sequence.
Seite 70
Controls Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally,
observe the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 71.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 75.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 76.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 121.
Seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts can no longer be ensured. There is
a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
while driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Seite 71
Settings Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function, refer
to page 61, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 78.
Overview
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Seite 72
Controls Settings
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 73
Settings Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Backrest width
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjust‐
ing the side wings of the backrest.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of
the button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width in‐
creases.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Entering the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the back‐
rests before driving.◀
Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Seite 74
Controls Settings
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Original position
1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Electric forward/backward adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. To change the entry area:
▷ Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to the de‐
sired position. Releasing the button
stops window/roof movement.
▷ Press button briefly. The seat au‐
tomatically moves to the end po‐
sition. Pressing again stops the motion.
Original position
1.
Moving the seat to its original position:
▷ Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to its original
position. Releasing the button stops
window/roof movement.
▷ Press button briefly. The seat
moves to its original position.
Pressing again stops the motion.
2. Fold the backrest back.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to
ensure occupant safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used to buckle more
than one person, the efficacy of safety gear, in‐
cluding safety belts can no longer be ensured.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐
rectly.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
Seite 75
Settings Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐
gage audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
Display
The indicator light lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Seite 76
Controls Settings
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Seite 77
Settings Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Raise the head restraint beyond the resistance
point.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 58.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
Seite 78
Controls Settings
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Open and close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 61, is activated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 78.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the but‐
ton movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
Seite 79
Settings Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's
side mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
Seite 80
Controls Settings
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Settings
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 81
Settings Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐
dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 123.
Seite 82
Controls Transporting children safely
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening
systems can be limited or lost. A child can
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, for instance in
the event of an accident or braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems
or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐
cident and their fastening systems checked
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 123.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
Seite 83
Transporting children safely Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Seite 84
Controls Transporting children safely
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair,
2, of LATCH symbols.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1.
Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Upper LATCH retaining strap
For Canadian customers Only.
The following statement is required by Trans‐
port Canada:
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child re‐
straint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring
the use of a tether strap can be properly se‐
cured in the vehicle.
Seite 85
Transporting children safely Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
gine starts with the brake pedal
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.
Ignition on
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button again without stepping on the brake.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
some minutes of no use.
Radio-ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
sumers remain ready for operation.
Activating
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
button.
Seite 86
Controls Driving
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically acti‐
vates radio-ready state when the door is
opened if the lights are switched off or the day‐
time running lights are switched on.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance the ignition is automatically switched
off for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with
the Start/Stop button.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Seite 87
Driving Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Engine stop
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at
traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
system is automatically activated or deacti‐
vated.
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
Stop function is active, it is available when the
vehicle is traveling faster than about
3 mph/5 km/h.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is stopped.
Seite 88
Controls Driving
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐
tion when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
M/S or R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
Seite 89
Driving Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐
tion when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
cur, for instance if the brake pedal is de‐
pressed a number of times in succession.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, e.g., if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Seite 90
Controls Driving
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
If for once use during driving is required, en‐
gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Seite 91
Driving Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Seite 92
Controls Driving
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
tion is preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Seite 93
Driving Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are
switched on.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
shield in the fold-away position.
General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Seite 94
Controls Driving
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐
tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐
ers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Manual transmission
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Seite 95
Driving Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of property damage. When shifting into 5th or
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.◀
Schematic diagram
▷ 1 – 6: forward gears
▷ R: reverse
Shifting
General information
Depending on the engine installation, the en‐
gine speed during a shifting operation is ad‐
justed automatically as required for harmo‐
nious and dynamic gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐
verse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power, for instance in a vehicle wash,
or be pushed.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a
forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Seite 96
Controls Driving
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 98, in selector lever position N.
Parking position P
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in
selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 86, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 86, and when selector
lever position R or D is set.
▷ If, with the vehicle stationary and the selec‐
tor lever in position D or R, the driver's
safety belt unbuckled, the driver's door is
opened, and the brake pedal is not de‐
pressed.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the engine is running and the brake
pedal is depressed is it possible to change
from selector lever position P to another selec‐
tor lever position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
position R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
briefly push the selector lever in the de‐
sired direction, past a resistance point, if
needed. The selector lever automatically
returns to the center position when re‐
leased.
Seite 97
Driving Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance
in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Start the engine while pressing on the
brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
switch drive-ready state off in vehicle
washes.◀
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 100.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re‐
sistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 98
Controls Driving
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control deacti‐
vated.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration,
this function is active independently of the
above-specified conditions.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddles. This is not possible by switching
briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever
position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode tempora‐
rily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐
mission switches back to automatic mode.
With some transmission versions it is possible
to switch into automatic mode as follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
Seite 99
Driving Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
nently.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
ing away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐
row 1, and press and hold the selector
lever into selector lever position N, ar‐
row N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release the selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Seite 100
Controls Driving
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 194, period.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select Sport+ with
the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control was used, the transmis‐
sion must cool down for approx. 5 minutes, be‐
fore Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 101
Driving Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Messages, for instance Check Control
3 Tachometer 106
4 Current fuel consumption
5 Electronic displays
6 Fuel gauge 106
7 Reset miles 107
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 102
Controls Displays
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety
belt on the driver or passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 91.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a col‐
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
too small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high
differential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Person warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Seite 103
Displays Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
modify your driving style to the driving circum‐
stances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 145.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol is activated.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 145, and DTC Dynamic Traction Control,
refer to page 146.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 130.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light illuminates.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Follow the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator light flashes and then illuminates
continuously.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 126.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Seite 104
Controls Displays
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 241.
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 142.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 91.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 115.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 118.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 118.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 92.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed
consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
Temporary display
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. These
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Seite 105
Displays Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Functions
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 210.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
A red indicator light is displayed.
Check the coolant level.
Seite 106
Controls Displays
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Show/reset miles
Press the button.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the Onboard
Computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
taking curves aggressively, the engine
function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Seite 107
Displays Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Additional indicators"
Energy recovery
Display
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while the vehicle is coasting.
The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption
can be reduced.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Seite 108
Controls Displays
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission and with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: displaying
Symbol Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Shift into neutral.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
ing on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
count the information stored in the navigation
Seite 109
Displays Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, Speed
Limit Info is active every time the vehicle drives
off and is displayed on the instrument cluster
automatically. Otherwise, Speed Limit Info is
available via the Onboard Computer and can
be switched on separately.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Speed limit information"
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐
played on the Info Display in the instrument
cluster via the Onboard Computer.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
Seite 110
Controls Displays
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel and the display in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as
average values.
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of
the instrument cluster. Pressing the button re‐
peatedly displays additional information.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the Info Display:
Seite 111
Displays Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of
arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance
to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired information.
Indication in the Info Display
The information from the On‐
board Computer is shown in the
Info Display in the instrument
cluster.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
Onboard Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature,
based on a combination of coolant and engine
oil temperature. As soon as the optimum oper‐
ating temperature has been attained, the indi‐
cator is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en‐
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed too.
Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed
if a destination is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
Seite 112
Controls Displays
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment, the estimated time of ar‐
rival is displayed if a destination
is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
Info.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa‐
ble on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as
the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill.
Sport displays
General information
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
Seite 113
Displays Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the Controller.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 130.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 126.
▷ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer
to page 126.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 234.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 106.
▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐
ice requirements, refer to page 108.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
Seite 114
Controls Displays
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Symbol Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automat‐
ically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
Canada: when parking, switch on the one-
sided roadside parking light, refer to
page 115.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Seite 115
Lights Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point.
Switching off
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Welcome lamps and
headlamp courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lamps
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
,
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after
radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
light is switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
Seite 116
Controls Lights
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch:
, ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adaptive Light Control
Concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 117.
Activating
Position of switch:
Adaptive Headlight Control is active when the
engine is running.
Cornering light
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve better when the vehicle is moving
below a certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
Seite 117
Lights Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic
situation allows. In the low speed range, the
high beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 92.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐
way.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Seite 118
Controls Lights
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 116, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on/off
Press button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
reading lights are located next to the interior
lights in the front and rear.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Selecting color scheme
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 119
Lights Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 120
Controls Lights
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Side airbag
4 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest, lap, and head
area.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Seite 121
Safety Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag
system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa‐
tion.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended despite the accident severity. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the air‐
bag system checked, repaired, dismantled and
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 122
Controls Safety
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
Seite 123
Safety Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
cates that the child restraint system has been
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1. Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Rollover protection system
The concept
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of a sufficiently serious
accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex‐
cessively. The safety frames located behind
the rear headrests extend within fractions of a
second.
Supplementing the reinforced front windshield
frame, the rollover protection system further
increases passenger safety.
General information
Do not place any objects on the covers of the
rollover protection system.
Safety information
WARNING
There can be damage or injuries when
the rollover protection system is triggered.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the rollover protection system is clear.◀
Seite 124
Controls Safety
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the system. In the case of a malfunction, the
system might not trigger as intended even if
there is an accident severe enough to warrant
it. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Have the system checked, repaired, disman‐
tled and scrapped by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
WARNING
After triggering or damage, system func‐
tionality is limited or not available anymore.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Have the system checked and replaced by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop in the event of
triggering of or damage to the system.◀
WARNING
With an extended rollover protection sys‐
tem, the area of movement of the convertible
top is limited. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. When the rollover protection
system is extended, do not move the
convertible top.◀
Overview
Covers of the rollover protection system
Triggered rollover protection system
If the rollover protection system was not
placed under any stress after an automatic
triggering, it can be pushed back by hand, e.g.,
to close the convertible top. The protective
function of the system is then restored.
1. Pull the release lever in the safety frame up
and hold it, arrow 1.
2. Push the safety frame down, arrow 2.
3. Release the release lever only if the safety
frame was pushed back almost completely.
4. Push the safety frame down until it notice‐
ably engages. To do this, the safety frame
must be pressed far into its holder; high
levels of force are required.
WARNING
If the safety frame is not engaged
correctly, it can extend jerkily. There is risk
of injuries. When pressing down the trig‐
gered rollover protection system, do not
bend over the safety frame.◀
Slowly reduce pressure on the safety
frame in order to test whether it is latched.
5.
Proceed likewise with the second safety
frame.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed
when there is a malfunction.
Seite 125
Safety Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in‐
flation pressure and, depending on the model,
the tire temperature.
With use of the system follow further informa‐
tion found under Tire inflation pressure, refer
to page 214.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐
tem is active.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning re‐
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐
ing the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Resetting the system
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
Seite 126
Controls Safety
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐
lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See
label for recommended pressures." is dis‐
played.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire inflation
pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
Seite 127
Safety Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure
gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
Seite 128
Controls Safety
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving range varies depending
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐
flation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, for instance a flat
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
are correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the
reset. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
Seite 129
Safety Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat
tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
ization was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was
performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, for example, whether the RPA is
active.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Seite 130
Controls Safety
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure
gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Seite 131
Safety Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving range varies depending
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss
in all four tires will not be recognized.
Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure
regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
▷ Approach control warning, refer to
page 133.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 139.
Seite 132
Controls Safety
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure.
Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Approach control warning
Depending on the equipment, the approach
control warning system consists of one of the
two systems:
▷ Approach control warning with City light
braking function, refer to page 133.
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 136
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
Seite 133
Safety Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 134
Controls Safety
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Seite 135
Safety Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
ror is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of premature or unjustified warn‐
ings and reactions.
Approach control warning
with light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is executed
with limited braking force and for a brief period
only.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go, the approach control
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
dar sensor.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
Seite 136
Controls Safety
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Seite 137
Safety Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The detection of objects can be influenced by
technical system limitations, for instance pe‐
destrians or stationary objects. Observe the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
automatic braking intervention if there is a risk
of a collision. The braking intervention can
bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
the braking intervention occurs as a brief brak‐
ing pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
Seite 138
Controls Safety
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
▷ Stationary objects.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of premature or unjustified warn‐
ings and reactions.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a col‐
lision with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
Seite 139
Safety Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are switched on.
The LED lights up.
Seite 140
Controls Safety
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Seite 141
Safety Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to
leave the lane.
General information
Depending on the country version, the system
issues a warning at speeds between
35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning may
vary depending on the current driving situa‐
tion.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess road and traffic
safety. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Seite 142
Controls Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Issued warning
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Attentiveness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is
recommended that the driver takes a break.
Seite 143
Safety Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess one's physical
state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue
may not be detected or not be detected in
time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐
rect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
Seite 144
Controls Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
the individual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 146, is a version of the DSC where for‐
ward momentum is optimized.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
Seite 145
Driving stability control systems Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go
out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is opti‐
mized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
for instance unplowed snowy roads, but with
somewhat limited driving stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC
OFF lights up.
Seite 146
Controls Driving stability control systems
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor light go out.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes
traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-
wheel-drive system variably distributes the
drive forces to the front and rear axles as de‐
manded by the driving situation and road sur‐
face.
Dynamic Damping Control
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
ing comfort depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Variable sport steering
The support offered by the variable sport
steering changes according to the angle by
which the steering wheel has been turned and
the speed.
So, for instance the steering angle of the front
wheels is made larger when parking or taking
tight corners. This makes it easier to drive
around bends.
Furthermore, the system provides the steering
with more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
By taking the angle by which the steering
wheel has been turned and the speed into ac‐
count, a sporty steering response adapted to
the particular driving situation can be achieved.
Servotronic
Concept
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel or a comfortable steering response
is conveyed.
Seite 147
Driving stability control systems Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Operating the programs
Button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 146, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 146, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in curves.
SPORT+
Concept
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension and adjusted drivetrain with limited
driving stabilization.
General information
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator light is illumi‐
nated: Dynamic Traction Control DTC
is activated.
Seite 148
Controls Driving stability control systems
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
SPORT
Concept
Depending on the equipment, consistently
sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and
drivetrain for greater driving agility with maxi‐
mum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the driver profile currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
COMFORT
Concept
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 148.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO provides consistent tuning to mini‐
mize fuel consumption for maximum range
with maximum driving stabilization.
Comfort functions and the engine Controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ SPORT, refer to page 149.
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 202.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Seite 149
Driving stability control systems Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Seite 150
Controls Driving stability control systems
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function ACC
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the
set distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the
given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, for instance in
the following situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
Seite 151
Driving comfort Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt,
refer to page 152
Store, maintain speed, refer to
page 153
Call up speed, continue cruise
control, refer to page 154
Reduce distance, refer to
page 154
Increase distance, refer to
page 154
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 153
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
can be set depends on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Seite 152
Controls Driving comfort
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐
er's door is opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is im‐
paired, for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 sec‐
onds when the vehicle has been braked to
a stop by the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 154.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
The speed can also be stored by
pressing a button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Seite 153
Driving comfort Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents
or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the
traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and main‐
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by
braking.◀
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 154.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 154.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and distance
Press button with the system
switched on.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
Seite 154
Controls Driving comfort
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Distance display
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was detected.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐
vate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelera‐
tor pedal or pressing the RES button or the
rocker switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal
sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.
The system also does not react in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Seite 155
Driving comfort Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi‐
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed.
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
does not react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi‐
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the accelerator pedal the sys‐
tem is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Seite 156
Controls Driving comfort
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
instance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred, for instance dur‐
ing parking.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Cruise control
The concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
refer to page 158.
Store speed, refer to page 158.
Seite 157
Driving comfort Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Button Function
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 159.
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
page 158.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 159.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Seite 158
Controls Driving comfort
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Seite 159
Driving comfort Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
With appropriate equipment: obstacles on the
side of the vehicle that are detected by the
sensors of the parking assistant can also be re‐
ported by the PDC. See side protection, refer
to page 162.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors
at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control is activated, the warning can be
delayed due to physical circumstances. There
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol is not yet active.◀
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
Seite 160
Controls Driving comfort
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ If equipped with parking assistant: when
obstacles are detected behind or in front of
the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected. Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐
cle washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehi‐
cle is approaching an object. E.g., if an object
is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a sig‐
nal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously
located both in front of and behind the vehicle,
an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 161
Driving comfort Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
With appropriate protection: side
protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
General information
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to
the vehicle was not yet captured.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
the markings are shown in black after a certain
time. The area next to the vehicle must be
newly captured.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Seite 162
Controls Driving comfort
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐
tem is again fully functional.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐
cle washes, to reduce false alarms.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Seite 163
Driving comfort Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Overview
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
PDC Park Distance Control is shown on the
Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC Park Distance Control activated:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, spa‐
tially shaped markings are displayed.
Seite 164
Controls Driving comfort
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Seite 165
Driving comfort Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Display settings
Brightness.
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast.
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, some
assistance functions also consider data from
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Parking assistant
Concept
The system supports parking in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
Seite 166
Controls Driving comfort
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Also observe the safety information for PDC
Park Distance Control.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The four ultrasound sensors for measuring
parking spaces are located in the front and rear
on the side of the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Diagonal parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐
cal limitations, the system is only able to
approximate the depth of diagonal parking
spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set where applicable.
Seite 167
Driving comfort Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
assistant is activated and the parking
space search is active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
clearly detected, the system automatically
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 168. Acti‐
vate the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 168.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
Seite 168
Controls Driving comfort
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
appear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When deactivating DSC Dynamic Stability
Control.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 168, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ With DSC Dynamic Stability Control deac‐
tivated.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Seite 169
Driving comfort Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 170
Controls Driving comfort
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
and a climate-control system for regulating
temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
climate control with automatic recirculated-air
control AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 74
2 Air distribution settings
3 Rear window defroster
4 Air flow
5 AUTO program
6 Temperature
7 Seat heating, right 74
8 Air conditioning
9 Recirculated-air mode
10 Interior temperature sensor
Seite 171
Climate control Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 197, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Depending on the selected tempera‐
ture and outside influences, the air is directed
to the windshield, side windows, upper body,
and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 172, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is open, the
convertible program is activated as well. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the
convertible top open. In addition, the air flow is
increased as the vehicle speed increases.
The efficiency of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐
flector.
Seite 172
Controls Climate control
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Floor area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
dows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 240.
Seite 173
Climate control Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 74
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program
4 Display
5 Maximum cooling
6 Temperature, right
7 Seat heating, right 74
8 Air conditioning
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
10 Air distribution, right
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
12 Air distribution, left
13 Rear window defroster
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
Seite 174
Controls Climate control
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 197, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Depending on the selected tempera‐
ture, the intensity of the AUTO program, and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 175, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
In the AUTO program, the air flow may be re‐
duced during a phone call on the hands-free
system.
Seite 175
Climate control Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the in‐
tensity can be set. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is open, the
convertible program is activated as well. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the
convertible top open. In addition, the air flow is
increased as the vehicle speed increases.
The efficiency of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐
flector.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Seite 176
Controls Climate control
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and floor
area: driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards
the side windows as needed.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 240.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Settings
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when car's in‐
terior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Seite 177
Climate control Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's
interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on
and off directly or by using two preset activa‐
tion times. The system remains switched on
for 30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready
state.
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time:
does not depend on external temperature.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after the engine is started or
after a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐
vated.
Seite 178
Controls Climate control
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 179
Climate control Controls
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys‐
tems. The Integrated Universal Remote Con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for instance
the garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
versal Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 180
Controls Interior equipment
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
Seite 181
Interior equipment Controls
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for instance
the garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
hold the two outer buttons on the interior mir‐
ror simultaneously for approximately 20 sec‐
onds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 182
Controls Interior equipment
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
played.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Make sure that the convertible top is com‐
pletely closed.
4. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
5. Open convertible top completely.
6. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Seite 183
Interior equipment Controls
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to switch between English "E"
and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Installing
The ashtray can be inserted in both cup hold‐
ers.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Cigarette lighter
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Slide the cover forward.
Seite 184
Controls Interior equipment
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for instance portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
or be thrown around in the car's interior when
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the socket or cigarette lighter cover.
Seite 185
Interior equipment Controls
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the left side in the
cargo area.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec‐
tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 39.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
In the center console
Slide the cover forward.
A USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
Seite 186
Controls Interior equipment
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Cargo area
Through-loading system
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
General information
The rear seat backrest can be folded down
from the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, un‐
secured cargo can be thrown into the car's in‐
terior, for instance in case of an accident, brak‐
ing or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is
locked after folding it back.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
NOTE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.◀
NOTE
When folding down the rear backrests,
there can be damage to the rear backrest due
to plugged-in cup holders. There is a risk of
property damage. Before folding down the rear
backrests, remove the cup holders in the rear
seat.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the cargo area
1.
Pull the lever.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Fold back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seating
position and engage it.
Seite 187
Interior equipment Controls
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 188.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 189.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 189.
▷ Front storage compartment, in front of the
cup holders, refer to page 189.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 189.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 190.
▷ With two rear seats: Storage compartment
between the rear seats, refer to page 190.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Seite 188
Controls Storage compartments
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the tail‐
gate, refer to page 58, for instance.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, for instance glass
bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an
accident. Broken glass can be scattered in the
car's interior. There is a risk of injury. Do not
use any breakable objects while driving. Only
stow breakable objects in lockable storage
compartments.◀
Front storage compartment
There is a storage compartment in the center
console.
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Seite 189
Storage compartments Controls
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Opening
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
The center armrest can be pushed forward or
backward and engages in the end positions.
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, for in‐
stance an MP3 player, can be
connected via the USB audio in‐
terface in the center armrest.
Storage compartment in the
rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
console.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
NOTE
When folding down the rear backrests,
there can be damage to the rear backrest due
to plugged-in cup holders. There is a risk of
property damage. Before folding down the rear
backrests, remove the cup holders in the rear
seat.◀
Front
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
To open: slide the cover forward.
To close: slide the cover backward.
Rear
Between the seats.
Seite 190
Controls Storage compartments
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage compartment
One storage compartment each is located on
the left and right side.
Net for storage compartment
Smaller objects can be stored in the net of
right storage compartment.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
appropriately secured.◀
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 199, there
are two or four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to secure the
cargo, refer to page 199, and store small
parts.
Seite 191
Storage compartments Controls
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Seite 194
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ If the convertible top is closed, close all
windows.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and never
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Seite 195
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Braking safely
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. Func‐
tional noises have no effect on the perform‐
ance and operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
gine braking effect, braking force boost and
steering assistance, are restricted or not avail‐
able at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
drive in idle state or with the engine switched
off.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Seite 196
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Seite 197
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐
ces and changing the steering response.
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to
the permitted load capacity of the tires and
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Seite 198
Driving tips Loading
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps, the floor net, or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
To secure the cargo there are two or four lash‐
ing eyes in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
To secure the cargo the floor net can also be
used.
Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
area floor.
Seite 199
Loading Driving tips
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Closing the windows
Open windows increase air resistance and
therefore lead to greater fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator, refer to page 109.
Seite 200
Driving tips Saving fuel
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 240.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, for instance
the climate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever
position remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 203.
▷ Activate/deactivate the display, refer to
page 203.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 202.
Seite 201
Saving fuel Driving tips
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 204.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 205.
Overview
Driving Dynamics Control
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Select the desired setting.
Using iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/deac‐
tivated:
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "Coasting"
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
ECO PRO limit
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐
sumption.
In addition, the power output to the seat and
mirror heating is reduced.
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and coasting with the engine
idling.
Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
ECO PRO potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.
Seite 202
Driving tips Saving fuel
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
ECO PRO efficiency display
The color of the ECO PRO displays in the in‐
strument cluster tell you how efficiently you
are driving:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, for exam‐
ple by backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for driving with optimized fuel effi‐
ciency are met.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
ECO PRO displays also inform you about your
current driving style. This is indicated by a
pointer which moves along a scale. The pointer
tells you whether energy is being consumed to
accelerate the vehicle or whether energy is be‐
ing recovered through coasting and braking. If
the pointer remains in the blue range on the
scale, you are driving efficiently.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
The ECO PRO tip indicates that the
driving style can be adjusted to be
more fuel efficient, for example by
backing off the accelerator.
Activating/deactivating the display
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "ECO PRO info"
ECO PRO tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Steptronic transmission:
Switch from M/S to D and avoid
manual shift interventions.
Manual transmission:
Follow the shift instructions.
Manual transmission:
Engage neutral for an engine stop.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics
information
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO func‐
tions can be displayed on the Control Display.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Seite 203
Saving fuel Driving tips
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average consumption can be displayed on
the Control Display.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected time frame.
Adjusting the fuel consumption
history time frame
1. Press button.
2. Adjust the time frame.
Reset fuel consumption history
1. Press button.
2. "Reset consumption history"
Coasting
Concept
This function helps to save fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
The function is available in the speed range
from approx. 30 mph/50 km/h up to
100 mph/160 km/h.
The function is active if the following condi‐
tions are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal not de‐
pressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1.
Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the
right shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐
ometer approximately indicates idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Seite 204
Driving tips Saving fuel
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting mode is displayed in
EfficientDynamics while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is
shown in the fuel consumption history. The
counter is reset prior to every departure.
Color code blue: coasting mode.
Displaying Efficient Dynamics information
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
System limits
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions applies:
▷ If DSC OFF or TRACTION is activated.
▷ If cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily
too low.
▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing
excessive current.
Driving style analysis
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving
style and save some fuel.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adopting an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
Functional requirement
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient your driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
Seite 205
Saving fuel Driving tips
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving
fuel, refer to page 200.
Seite 206
Driving tips Saving fuel
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Seite 207
Saving fuel Driving tips
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 212, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 210
Mobility Refueling
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Observe the following when
refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 211
Refueling Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
Seite 212
Mobility Fuel
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 213
Fuel Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has
not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
The tire inflation pressure specifications only
relate to cold tires or tires at the same temper‐
ature as the ambient temperature.
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto
the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 215, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 215, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 214
Mobility Wheels and tires
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
230i, 230i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36
205/50 R 17 89
V M+S A/S RSC
205/50 R 17 89
H M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL A/S
RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/45
R 17 91 W RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 245/40
R 17 91 W RSC
- 2.5 / 36
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40
ZR 18 88 Y Std
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 ZR
18 92 Y XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/35
R 19 88 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Emergency
wheel:
T 125/80 R 17
99 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
M240i, M240i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
205/50 R 17 89
H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL A/S
RSC
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
Seite 215
Wheels and tires Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/40
ZR 18 88 Y Std
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 ZR
18 92 Y XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/35
R 19 88 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Emergency
wheel:
T 125/80 R 17
99 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 216, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
230i, 230i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S RSC
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
205/50 R 17 89
V M+S A/S RSC
205/50 R 17 89
H M+S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL A/S
RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Front: 225/45
R 17 91 W RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 245/40
R 17 91 W RSC
- 2.7 / 39
Front: 225/40 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40
ZR 18 88 Y Std
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 ZR
18 92 Y XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/35
R 19 88 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Seite 216
Mobility Wheels and tires
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Emergency
wheel:
T 125/80 R 17
99 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91
W RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
205/50 R 17 89
H M+S RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL RSC
2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49
Front: 225/45
R 17 91 W RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 245/40
R 17 91 W RSC
- 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/40 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Front: 225/40
ZR 18 88 Y Std
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 245/35 ZR
18 92 Y XL Std
- 3.1 / 45
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/35
R 19 88 Y XL
RSC
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
RSC
- 3.4 / 49
Emergency
wheel:
T 125/80 R 17
99 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
M240i, M240i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
205/50 R 17 89
H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL A/S
RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
Front: 225/40
ZR 18 88 Y Std
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 ZR
18 92 Y XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Seite 217
Wheels and tires Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/35
R 19 88 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Emergency
wheel:
T 125/80 R 17
99 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
205/50 R 17 89
H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S RSC
225/40 R 18 92
V M+S XL RSC
2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49
Front: 225/40
ZR 18 88 Y Std
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 245/35
ZR 18 92 Y XL
Std
- 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/40 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL RSC
- 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/35
R 19 88 Y XL
RSC
2.9 / 42 -
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
RSC
- 3.4 / 49
Emergency
wheel:
T 125/80 R 17
99 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
– on the certification label on the driver’s door
pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle
Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
Seite 218
Mobility Wheels and tires
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2117
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2117: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 2117 21st week of 2017
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Seite 219
Wheels and tires Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
Seite 220
Mobility Wheels and tires
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
is a danger of accidents and property damage.
If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive
over them slowly and carefully.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel/
tire combination remounted on the vehicle as
soon as possible.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests
that you use wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Seite 221
Wheels and tires Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they usually do not provide the same level of
performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible
maximum speed in the field of view. The label
is available from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs
between the axles to achieve even wear. Fur‐
ther information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire
pressure and correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under
restricted conditions even in the event of a
complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
Seite 222
Mobility Wheels and tires
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire. Only remove
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
TPM wheel electronics replaced at the
next opportunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Seite 223
Wheels and tires Mobility
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 On/off switch
2 Sealant container holder
3 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
4 Tire pressure gage
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
of the compressor
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Filling
1.
Shake the sealant container.
Seite 224
Mobility Wheels and tires
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
2. Take the connection hose completely out
of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐
tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐
ing that it engages audibly.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
and screw the connection hose onto the
tire valve of the nonworking wheel.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐
hicle.
7. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
Seite 225
Wheels and tires Mobility
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Unscrew the filling hose from the tire valve.
4. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
5. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1.
Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the tire valve.
2. Pull the compressor connector out of the
socket inside the vehicle.
3. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container and
the connection hose in suitable material to
avoid dirtying the cargo area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the
cargo area.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire
valve stem.
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the
compressor.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the
ignition switched on or the engine run‐
ning, switch on the compressor.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
the button on the compressor.
Seite 226
Mobility Wheels and tires
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System at the next
opportunity.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 17.
▷ 225/40 R 18.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mount‐
ing snow chains, as doing so may result in in‐
correct readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting snow chains, as doing so may
result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed im‐
mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is provided by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer for changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. The vehicle jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use, for instance for chang‐
ing from summer to winter tires. Using the ve‐
hicle jack frequently may cause it to jam or
become damaged. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only use the vehi‐
cle jack to change an emergency wheel or a
spare tire in the event of a flat tire.◀
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for
example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐
ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-
resistant surface.◀
Seite 227
Wheels and tires Mobility
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is
raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle
or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐
ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
you wish to change.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐
ble objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on‐
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart‐
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Seite 228
Mobility Wheels and tires
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor‐
que is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
Seite 229
Wheels and tires Mobility
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐
cle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack
as soon as the vehicle jack is under load
and continue turning the vehicle jack crank
or lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
tended vertically.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire
surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
Seite 230
Mobility Wheels and tires
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐
wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower
the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 231
Wheels and tires Mobility
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Filler neck for washer fluid
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Engine compartment fuse box
6 Oil filler neck
7 Coolant reservoir
The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
Seite 232
Mobility Engine compartment
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐
stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from
moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 233
Engine compartment Mobility
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on
the Control Display depending on the engine
oil level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance
when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐
form a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
Seite 234
Mobility Engine oil
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be
possible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 236.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Seite 235
Engine oil Mobility
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 232.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 233.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity
grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐
partment.
Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for
particular engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
Seite 236
Mobility Engine oil
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 237
Engine oil Mobility
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
General information
The coolant level is indicted using minimum
and maximum markings. Depending on the
coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
markings are located at different locations.
Concept
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
Checking the coolant level on the side
markings
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Symbol Meaning
Maximum
Minimum
Seite 238
Mobility Coolant
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Checking the coolant level in the filler
neck
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 239
Coolant Mobility
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 108, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Seite 240
Mobility Maintenance
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 241
Maintenance Mobility
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under
the cargo floor panel.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
4. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
5. Fold down the wipers.
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 242
Mobility Replacing components
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 243.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
related to conventional lasers, are officially
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 243.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of property damage. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐
ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Front lights, bulb replacement
LED headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
All front lamps and side turn signals are de‐
signed with LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 243
Replacing components Mobility
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Turn signal
2 Outer brake lights
3 Inside brake light
4 Reversing light
5 Rear light
Bulb replacement
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 243.
Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, W21W.
The turn signals, brake lights, and rear lights
feature LED technology. In the case of a mal‐
function, contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Removing the tail lamp
1.
Open tailgate.
2. Open the two covers on the tail lamp.
3. With the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, loosen and re‐
move the nuts on the two fasteners. Make
sure that the nuts do not drop into the
bumper area. In addition to the two outer
fasteners, there is another inner fastener.
4. Hold the grip rail in one hand, arrow 1, and
brace against the outside with your other
hand, arrow 2. Carefully pry out the tail
lamp, arrow 3, until the rubber mount re‐
leases from the inner fastener.
5. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs
1.
Turn the cover in the direction indicated on
the housing and remove it.
Seite 244
Mobility Replacing components
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and cover in reverse
order of removal.
Installing the tail lamp
1. Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
2. Insert the tail lamp straight in and press it
in, arrow 1, until the rubber mount latches
in the inner fastener. Make sure when in‐
serting the tail lamp that the rubber lip, ar‐
row 2, on the top side of the tail lamp does
not fold over. Screw on the two nuts, ar‐
row 3, and close covers.
Central brake lamp and license plate
lamp
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 243.
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Seite 245
Replacing components Mobility
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 251, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Replacing a fuse
The fuses are located in two different places in
the vehicle.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
In the engine compartment
General information
On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuses are lo‐
cated on the opposite side of the engine com‐
partment.
Removing the cover
1.
Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
2. Squeeze and raise the holder, arrow 2.
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Seite 246
Mobility Replacing components
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Attaching the covers
1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 247
Replacing components Mobility
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button at the interior mirror
Functional requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is auto‐
matically initiated immediately after an acci‐
dent of corresponding severity. Automatic
Collision Notification is not affected by press‐
ing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request
manually
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
Seite 248
Mobility Breakdown assistance
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW
Response Center through the loudspeak‐
ers, the BMW Response Center may still
be able to hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Roadside Assistance
General information
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
Concept
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition are sent directly to Roadside
Assistance.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 106.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
ment version with Intelligent emergency
call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Ignition or standby state is switched on.
Starting Roadside Assistance
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is offered through Teleservice Diagno‐
sis.
Using iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
A voice connection is established to Roadside
Assistance.
Starting Teleservice Help
Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagno‐
sis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via
wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
it through Roadside Assistance.
1.
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
Seite 249
Breakdown assistance Mobility
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re‐
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will be
initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will
be informed.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area in
the storage compartment.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
Seite 250
Mobility Breakdown assistance
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Seite 251
Breakdown assistance Mobility
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Manual transmission
Towing or pushing the vehicle
A broken-down vehicle can be towed or
pushed.
Roll or push, refer to page 96, the vehicle.
Follow the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐
cle's response.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With rear-wheel drive
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
With xDrive
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
Seite 252
Mobility Breakdown assistance
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Steptronic transmission: transporting
the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
tance.
Roll or push, refer to page 98, the vehicle.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
Seite 253
Breakdown assistance Mobility
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 242, are together in the cargo
area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 250. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 86.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
Seite 254
Mobility Breakdown assistance
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 255
Breakdown assistance Mobility
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Water can penetrate in the windshield
area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
washers.◀
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod
antenna breaking off.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.
▷ Do not treat the convertible top with wax.
Ensure that a cycle without wax or a spe‐
cial cycle for convertibles is available to
avoid damage to the convertible top.◀
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
manual transmission
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 96.
Seite 256
Mobility Care
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 98.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the ve‐
hicle.
Start the engine.
Starting the engine, refer to page 87.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish.
Caring for the convertible top
General information
The appearance and life of the convertible top
depend on correct care and operation.
Seite 257
Care Mobility
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Follow the following instructions:
▷ Clean roofliner with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
▷ Do not soak the roofliner.
▷ To avoid water stains, spots of mold, and
chafe marks, do not keep the convertible
top enclosed in its case for a long period of
time. Do not fold up the convertible top or
stow it in its case when it is wet or icy.
▷ Remove any water stains that have ap‐
peared on the roofliner using a microfiber
cloth and an interior cleaner.
▷ When the vehicle is parked in enclosed
areas for lengthy periods, ensure that the
area is well ventilated.
▷ Park the vehicle in the shade to protect it
from intensive solar radiation so that color,
rubber, and fabric are not affected.
▷ Remove bird droppings immediately as
their corrosive effect will otherwise attack
the convertible top and damage the rubber
seals.
▷ Hard to remove tree sap or bird droppings
can be removed from the convertible top
with special tree sap remover and a soft
brush.
Safety information
NOTE
Spot remover, paint thinner, solvents,
gasoline or similar can damage the convertible
top or the rubber coating. There is a risk of
property damage. To remove spots on the
convertible top, use only suitable cleaning
agents, e.g., special convertible top cleaning
agent.◀
Cleaning the convertible top
To remove heavy soiling, especially for light
colored convertible tops, use a special
convertible top cleaner.
Proceed as follows when cleaning:
1. Spray the convertible top with the
convertible top cleaner. Follow the manu‐
facturer's instructions.
2. Make the convertible top cleaner foam up
using a well saturated sponge, moving it in
circular motions.
3. Rinse vehicle with ample amounts of water
or finish washing the vehicle in the vehicle
wash. Observe notes regarding automatic
washing systems or vehicle washes.
Treat the convertible top with an impregnating
agent after it has been washed three to five
times.
Suitable cleaning agents and care products are
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Seite 258
Mobility Care
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Seite 259
Care Mobility
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/screens
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 260
Mobility Care
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Seite 261
Care Mobility
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
e.g., due to the selected special equipment,
country version or country-specific measure‐
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
the selected special equipment, tires, load and
chassis version.
BMW 2 Series Convertible
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.1/1,984
Width without mirrors inches/mm 69.8/1,774
Height inches/mm 55.2-55.6/1,403-1,413
Length inches/mm 174.7-175.9/4,437-4,469
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.9/2,690
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.8-37.1/10.9-11.3
Seite 264
Reference Technical data
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Weights
230i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,431/2,010
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,028/920
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,491/1,130
230i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,575/2,075
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,172/985
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,524/1,145
M240i powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,508/2,045
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,542/2,060
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,150/975
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,524/1,145
M240i xDrive powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,652/2,110
Load lbs/kg 659/299
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,249/1,020
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,524/1,145
Seite 265
Technical data Reference
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Information: vehicle identification number,
refer to page 12.
▷ Safety: approach control warning with city
light braking function.
▷ Safety: approach control warning with light
braking function.
Seite 267
Appendix Reference
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 145
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go function 151
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 100
Accessories and parts 8
Activated-charcoal filter 177
Activation times, parked-car
ventilation 178
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function
ACC 151
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 143
Adaptive Light Control 117
Additives, oil 236
After washing vehicle 257
Airbags 121
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 122
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 173, 176
Air conditioning 172, 175
Air, dehumidifying, see Air
conditioning 172, 175
Air distribution,
manual 173, 176
Air flow, air conditioner 173
Air flow, automatic climate
control 176
Air pressure, tires 214
Air vents, see Ventilation 177
Alarm system 62
Alarm, unintentional 63
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 222
All-wheel-drive 147
Alternative oil types 236
Ambient light 119
Antifreeze, washer fluid 95
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 145
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 145
Anti-theft protection, lug
bolts 228
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6
Approach control warning
with light braking func‐
tion 136
Approved axle load 265
Apps, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Arrival time 113
Ashtray 184
Assistance when driving
off 150
Attentiveness assistant 143
AUTO intensity 176
Automatic climate con‐
trol 171
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 174
Automatic cruise control with
Stop & Go function 151
Automatic Curb Monitor 80
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 123
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 116
Automatic locking 62
Automatic recirculated-air
control 176
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmission 96
Automatic vehicle wash 256
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 175
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 172
AUTO program, intensity 176
Auto Start/Stop function 88
Auto washing 256
AUX-IN port, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Average fuel consump‐
tion 112
Average speed 112
Axle loads, weights 265
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 73
Backrest, width 74
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 250
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 245
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 53
Battery, vehicle 245
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 252
Belts, safety belts 75
Beverage holder, cup
holder 190
Bluetooth connection 37
Blu-ray, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
BMW Assist, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Seite 268
Reference Everything from A to Z
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 240
Bonus range, ECO PRO 203
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 190
Brake assistant 145
Brake discs, break-in 194
Brake force display 143
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 143
Brake pads, break-in 194
Braking, information 196
Breakdown assis‐
tance 248, 249
Break-in 194
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 34
Bulb replacement 242
Bulb replacement, front 243
Bulb replacement, rear 244
Bulbs and lights 242
Button, RES 154
Button, Start/Stop 86
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 250
C
Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 61
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 61
Camera-based assistance
systems, see Intelligent
Safety 132
Camera lenses, care 260
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 164
Can holder, see Cup
holder 190
Care, displays 260
Care, vehicle 257
Care, washing the vehi‐
cle 256
Cargo 198
Cargo area 187
Cargo area, enlarging 187
Cargo area, loading 199
Cargo area partition 67
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 191
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 199
Carpet, care 260
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 195
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 240
CD/multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
CD, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Center armrest 189
Center console 18
Central Information Display
(CID), see Control Dis‐
play 20
Central locking system 55
Central screen, see Control
Display 20
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Changing parts 242
Changing wheels 227
Changing wheels/tires 221
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 12
Check Control 102
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 234
Children, seating position 82
Children, transporting
safely 82
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 84
Child restraint system 82
Child restraint systems,
mounting 83
Child seat, mounting 83
Child seats 82
Chrome parts, care 259
Cigarette lighter 184
Cleaning, displays 260
Climate control 171, 174
Coasting 204
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 204
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 204
Cockpit 16
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 91
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 92
Comfort Access 55
COMFORT program, driving
dynamics 149
Compartments in the
doors 189
Compass 182
Compatible devices, see Suit‐
able devices 37
Compressor 223
Computer, see Onboard
Computer 111
Concierge Service, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Condensation on win‐
dows 177
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 197
Condition Based Service
CBS 240
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 149
Seite 269
Everything from A to Z Reference
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Confirmation signal 61
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Connecting device 36
Connecting mobile phone 36
Connecting smartphone 36
Connecting telephone 36
Connections 36
Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Container for washer fluid 95
Continued driving with a flat
tire 128, 132
Control Display 20
Control Display, settings 32
Controller 21
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 145
Convenient closing with the
remote control 52
Convenient opening with the
remote control 51
Convertible, convertible
top 65
Convertible mode, automatic
climate control 172, 176
Convertible program, auto‐
matic climate con‐
trol 172, 176
Convertible, roof 65
Convertible top 65
Convertible top, care 257
Convertible top, cargo area
partition 67
Convertible top, emergency
operation 67
Convertible top, rollover pro‐
tection system 124
Coolant 238
Coolant level 238
Coolant temperature 106
Cooling, maximum 175
Cooling system 238
Cornering light 117
Corrosion on brake discs 196
Cosmetic mirror 184
Coupling, see Pairing 36
Courtesy lights during un‐
locking 51
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐
cle locked 52
Cruise control 157
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go function 151
Cruise control with distance
control, see active cruise
control, ACC 151
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 157
Cruising range 107
Cup holder 190
Current fuel consump‐
tion 107
D
Damage, tires 220
Damping control, dy‐
namic 147
Data memory 9
Data protection, settings 35
Data, technical 264
Date 33
Date display 107
Daytime running lights 117
Defrosting, see defrosting the
windows 173
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 177
Defrosting the windows 173
Dehumidifying, air 172, 175
Deleting personal data 35
Deletion of personal data 35
Destination distance 112
Device list 36
Digital clock 107
Digital compass 182
Dimensions 264
Dimmable exterior mirrors 80
Dimmable interior mirror 80
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 91
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 112
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 119
Displays, care 260
Disposal, coolant 239
Disposal, vehicle battery 246
Distance control, see
PDC 160
Distance to destination 112
Divided screen view, split
screen 27
Drive-off assistant 150
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 145
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 132
Driver profiles 58
Driver profiles, exporting pro‐
files 60
Driver profiles, importing pro‐
files 60
Driver’s Guide app, see BMW
Driver’s Guide app 6
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 132
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 148
Driving instructions, break-
in 194
Driving instructions, ECO
PRO 203
Driving mode 148
Driving notes, general 195
Driving on racetracks 197
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 145
Driving style analysis 205
Driving tips 195
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 145
Seite 270
Reference Everything from A to Z
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 146
DVD, Video, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 147
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 145
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 146
E
ECO PRO 201
ECO PRO bonus range 203
ECO PRO display 201
ECO PRO driving mode 201
ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis 205
ECO PRO mode 201
ECO PRO tips 203
Efficiency display, ECO
PRO 203
Efficient driving 203
EfficientDynamics informa‐
tion 203
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 234
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 145
e-mail, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Emergency operation,
convertible top 67
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 211
Emergency Request 248
Emergency service, see
Breakdown assistance 249
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 249
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 58
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 100
Energy Control 107
Energy recovery 108
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 88
Engine, automatic switch-
off 88
Engine compartment 232
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 233
Engine coolant 238
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 204
Engine oil 234
Engine oil, adding 235
Engine oil additives 236
Engine oil change 236
Engine oil filler neck 235
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 236
Engine oil types, suitable 236
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 250
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 87
Engine stop 88
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 112
Entering a destination, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Entering an address, naviga‐
tion, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Entering a vehicle wash 256
Equipment, interior 180
Error displays, see Check
Control 102
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 145
Exchanging wheels/tires 221
Exhaust system 195
Exiting a vehicle wash 256
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 80
Exterior mirrors 79
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
tion 79
External start 250
External temperature dis‐
play 107
External temperature warn‐
ing 107
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 102
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 63
Fan, see Air flow 173, 176
Filler neck for engine oil 235
Finding charging stations, see
Charging stations and points
of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Fine wood, care 259
First-aid kit 250
Flat tire, changing
wheels 227
Flat tire message, FTM 131
Flat tire message, TPM 128
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 130
Flat tire, repairing 223
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 126
Flat tire warning light,
FTM 131
Flat tire warning light,
TPM 128
Flooding 195
Floor carpet, care 260
Floor mats, care 260
Fogged up windows 173
Fold-away position, wiper 94
Fold back rear seat back‐
rests 187
Seite 271
Everything from A to Z Reference
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Foot brake 196
For Your Own Safety 7
Front airbags 121
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 133
Front fog lamps, LED, bulb
replacement 243
Front fog lights 118
Front lights 243
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 123
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 123
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 130
Fuel 212
Fuel cap 210
Fuel consumption his‐
tory 203
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 112
Fuel filler flap 210
Fuel gauge 106
Fuel quality 212
Fuel recommendation 212
Fuel, tank capacity 266
Fuse 246
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 180
Gasoline 212
Gear shift indicator 109
General driving notes 195
General settings 32
Glare shield 184
Glove compartment 188
GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐
sition 33
GPS, navigation, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 265
H
Handbrake, see parking
brake 90
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 181
Hands-free kit, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Hazard warning flashers 248
Headlamps 243
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 116
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 116
Headlight flasher 92
Headlight glass 243
Headlights, care 257
Head restraints, front 76
Head restraints, rear 77
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 199
High-beam Assistant 118
High beams 92
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 118
Hills 196
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 150
Holder for beverages 190
Homepage 6
Hood 233
Horn 16
Hotel function, tailgate 58
Hot exhaust system 195
Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Hydroplaning 195
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 107
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 107
Identification marks, tires 218
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 12
iDrive 20
Ignition off 86
Ignition on 86
Indicator and warning lights,
see Check Control 102
Indicator light, see Check
Control 102
Individual air distribu‐
tion 173, 176
Individual settings, see driver
profiles 58
Inductive charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Inflation pressure, tires 214
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 130
Info Display, see Onboard
Computer 111
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 126
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 131
Instrument cluster 102
Instrument lighting 119
Integrated key 54
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 45
Intelligent emergency
call 248
Intelligent Safety 132
Intended use 7
Seite 272
Reference Everything from A to Z
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 176
Interior equipment 180
Interior lights 119
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 51
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 52
Interior mirror 79
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 80
Interior mirror, compass 182
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 80
Interior motion sensor 63
Internet connection 40
Internet hotspot 40
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 108
Interval mode 93
In the vicinity of the center
console 18
In the vicinity of the roof‐
liner 19
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 16
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 229
Jump-starting 250
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 55
Key, mechanical 54
Key, see Remote control 50
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 98
Knee airbag 121
L
Label on recommended
tires 221
Lamp replacement, front 243
Lamp replacement, rear 244
Lane departure warning 142
Lane threshold, warning 142
Language, on the Control
Display 32
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 84
Launch Control 100
Leather, care 258
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 243
Light 115
Light-alloy wheels, care 259
Light control 117
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 243
Lighting 115
Light replacement 242
Lights and bulbs 242
Light switch 115
List of all messages 34
Load 199
Loading 198
Location, vehicle position 33
Locking, automatic 62
Locking, settings 61
Low beams 115
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 118
Lower back support 73
Lug bolt lock 228
Lumbar support 73
M
Maintenance 240
Maintenance require‐
ments 240
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 108
Maintenance system,
BMW 240
Make-up mirror 184
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 102
Manual air distribu‐
tion 173, 176
Manual air flow 173, 176
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 211
Manual operation, PDC Park
Distance Control 161
Manual operation, rearview
camera 164
Manual transmission 95
Map update, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Marking, run-flat tires 222
Matte finish 257
Maximum cooling 175
Maximum speed, display 109
Maximum speed, winter
tires 222
Measurement, units of 33
Medical kit 250
Memory function 78
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 111
Menus 22
Menus, operating, iDrive 20
Messages 34
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 102
Microfilter 173, 177
Minimum tread, tires 220
Mirror 79
Mirror, see Memory func‐
tion 78
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 195
Mobility System 223
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 243
Seite 273
Everything from A to Z Reference
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 20
Mounting of child restraint
systems 83
MP3 player, see Audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 16
Music hard disk, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 76
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 77
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 259
New wheels and tires 221
Notes, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 241
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 241
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 165
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 213
Odometer 107
Office, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Oil 234
Oil, adding 235
Oil additives 236
Oil change 236
Oil change interval, service
requirements 108
Oil filler neck 235
Oil types, alternative 236
Oil types, suitable 236
Old batteries, disposal 246
Onboard Computer 111
Onboard vehicle tool kit 242
Online Entertainment, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Opening and closing 50
Operating concept, iDrive 20
Operating via iDrive 22
Operating with the Control‐
ler 22
Operation via touchscreen 24
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 176
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature 106
P
Paint, vehicle 257
Panic alarm, see Panic
mode 62
Panic mode 62
Parallel parking assistant 166
Park Distance Control
PDC 160
Parked-car ventilation 178
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 197
Parking aid, see PDC 160
Parking assistant 166
Parking brake 90
Parking lights 115
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing downward 80
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 165
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 160
Personal profile, see driver
profiles 58
Person warning with City light
braking function 139
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 64
Plastic, care 259
Power failure 246
Power windows 63
Prescribed engine oil
types 236
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 214
Pressure warning, tires 130
Profiles, see driver profiles 58
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 28
Protective function, win‐
dows 64
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐
troller 21
R
Racetrack operation 197
Radiator fluid 238
Radio-operated remote con‐
trol, opening/closing 50
Radio-ready state 86
Radio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Rain sensor 93
Rear lights 244
Rear socket 186
Rearview camera 163
Rear window de‐
froster 173, 177
Recirculated-air filter 177
Recirculated-air
mode 173, 176
Seite 274
Reference Everything from A to Z
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Recommended fuel
grade 213
Recommended tire
brands 221
Refueling 210
Remaining range 107
Remote control, additional 53
Remote control for audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Remote control, integrated
key 54
Remote control, loss 53
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 53
Remote control, opening/
closing 50
Remote control, univer‐
sal 180
Remote services, App, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Replacing parts 242
Replacing wheels/tires 221
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 12
RES button 154
RES button, see Active
Cruise Control ACC 151
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 157
Reserve warning, see
Range 107
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 126
Retreaded tires 221
Roadside Assistance 249
Roadside Assistancee, see
Breakdown assistance 249
Roadside parking lights 115
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 181
Rollover protection sys‐
tem 124
RON recommended fuel
grade 213
Roofliner 19
Roof, see Convertible top 65
Route, navigation, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, see Run-flat
tires 222
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Rubber components,
care 259
Run-flat tires 222
S
Safe braking 196
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 76
Safety belts 75
Safety belts, care 259
Safety belts, see Safety
belts 75
Safety systems, airbags 121
Saving fuel 200
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 20
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 242
Sealant 223
Seat heating, front 74
Seating position for chil‐
dren 82
Seat, see Memory func‐
tion 78
Securing cargo 199
Selection list in instrument
cluster 111
Selector lever, see Steptronic
transmission 96
Sensors, care 260
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 240
Service requirements, dis‐
play 108
Services, ConnectedDrive
Servotronic 147
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control ACC 151
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 157
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 61
Settings on the Control Dis‐
play 32
Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 96
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 99
Side airbags 121
Signaling, horn 16
Signals when unlocking 61
Sitting safely 71
Size 264
SMS, see Short messages,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
SMS text message, supple‐
mentary 106
Snow chains 227
Socket 185
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 241
Software update 43
SOS button 248
Sound output, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Speed, average 112
Speed Limit Info 109
Speed Limit Info, Onboard
Computer 113
Speed limits, display 109
Seite 275
Everything from A to Z Reference
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Speed warning 113
Split screen 27
SPORT+ - program, driving
dynamics 148
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 113
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 149
Sport steering, variable 147
Stability control systems 145
Standard equipment 7
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 88
Start/Stop button 86
Starting the engine 87
Stations, AM/FM, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Status control display,
tires 126
Status information, iDrive 27
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 114
Steering assistance 147
Steering wheel, adjusting 81
Steering wheel heating 81
Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 96
Steptronic transmission 96
Stopping the engine 88
Storage compartment in the
rear 190
Storage compartments 188
Storage, tires 222
Storing the vehicle 260
Stowing and securing
cargo 199
Suitable devices 37
Suitable engine oil types 236
Suitable mobile phones 37
Summer tires, tread 220
Sun visor 184
Supplementary SMS text
message 106
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 148
Switch, see Cockpit 16
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 27
T
Tachometer 106
Tailgate closing 58
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 58
Tailgate, hotel function 58
Tailgate opening 57
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 52
Tail lamps 244
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Technical data 264
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Teleservices, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Television, TV, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 172, 174
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 107
Temperature, engine 112
Terminal, starting aid 251
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 62
Thigh support 73
Through-loading system 187
Tilt alarm sensor 63
Time 32
Time of arrival 113
Tire damage 220
Tire identification marks 218
Tire inflation pressure 214
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 130
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 126
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 223
Tires, changing 221
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 223
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 214
Tires, run-flat tires 222
Tire tread 220
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tool 242
Total vehicle weight 265
Touchpad 26
Touchscreen 24
Towing 252
Tow-starting 252
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 126
Traction control 146
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 146
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 100
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 95
Transmission, Steptronic
transmission 96
Transporting children
safely 82
Tread, tires 220
Trip computer 113
Seite 276
Reference Everything from A to Z
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 91
Trip odometer 107
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 107
Trunk, cargo area partition 67
Trunk, emergency unlock‐
ing 58
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 165
Turn signals, operation 91
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 244
TV, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
U
Unintentional alarm 63
Units of measurement 33
Universal remote control 180
Unlock button, see Steptronic
transmission 96
Unlocking, settings 61
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 258
USB connection 39
USB interface, position in ve‐
hicle 186
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 186
Use, intended 7
V
Vanity mirror 184
Variable sport steering 147
Vehicle battery 245
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 245
Vehicle, break-in 194
Vehicle care 257
Vehicle care products 257
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 12
Vehicle jack 229
Vehicle paint 257
Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐
tion 33
Vehicle status 114
Vehicle storage 260
Vehicle wash 256
Vehicle, washing 256
Ventilation 177
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 178
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 12
Voice activation system 29
Voice command response,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
W
Warning and indicator lights,
see Check Control 102
Warning displays, see Check
Control 102
Warning messages, see
Check Control 102
Warning triangle 250
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 95
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 94
Washer system 92
Washing the vehicle 256
Water on roads 195
Weights 265
Welcome lamps 116
Welcome lights during un‐
locking 51
Wheel cleaner 259
Wheels, changing 221
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 214
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 130
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 126
WiFi connection 40
Wind deflector 69
Window defroster,
rear 173, 177
Windows, powered 63
Windshield washer fluid 95
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 94
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 92
Windshield washer system,
see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 92
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 92
Winter storage, care 260
Winter tires, suitable
tires 222
Winter tires, tread 220
Wiper 92
Wiper blades, replacing 242
Wiper fluid 95
Wiper, fold-away position 94
Wiper system 92
Wireless charging dock, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Wireless charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Wood, care 259
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 242
Seite 277
Everything from A to Z Reference
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01402981298 ue
*BL298129800P*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981298 - VI/17
